]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
Remove vec_perm_const optab
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
379 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
380 The default value of this macro is empty string.
381 @end defmac
382
383 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
384 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
385 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
386 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
387 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
388 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
389 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
390 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
391 @end defmac
392
393 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
394
395 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
396 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
397 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
398 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
399 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
400
401 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
402 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
403 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
404 @xref{Target Fragment}.
405 @end defmac
406
407 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
408 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
409 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
410 indicates an absolute file name.
411 @end defmac
412
413 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
414 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
415 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
416 when the compiler is built as a cross
417 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
418 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
419 @end defmac
420
421 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
422 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
423 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
424 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
425 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
426 is built as a cross compiler.
427 @end defmac
428
429 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
430 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
431 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
432 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
433 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
434 is built as a cross compiler.
435 @end defmac
436
437 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
438 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
439 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
440 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
441 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
442 is built as a cross compiler.
443 @end defmac
444
445 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
446 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
447 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
448 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
449 @end defmac
450
451 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
452 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
453 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
454 cross compiler.
455 @end defmac
456
457 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
458 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
459 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
460 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
461 initialize the necessary environment variables.
462 @end defmac
463
464 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
465 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
466 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
467 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
468 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
469 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
470
471 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
472 replacement.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
476 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
477 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
478 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
479 @end defmac
480
481 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
482 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
483 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
484 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
485 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
486 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
487 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
488 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
489 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
490
491 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
492 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
493 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
494 for C++-only directories,
495 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
496 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
497 the array with a null element.
498
499 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
500 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
501 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
502 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
503
504 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
505
506 @smallexample
507 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
508 @{ \
509 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
510 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
511 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
512 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
514 @}
515 @end smallexample
516 @end defmac
517
518 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
519
520 @enumerate
521 @item
522 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
523
524 @item
525 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
526 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
527 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
528
529 @item
530 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
531
532 @item
533 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
534 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
535
536 @item
537 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538
539 @item
540 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
541
542 @item
543 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
544 compiler.
545 @end enumerate
546
547 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
548
549 @enumerate
550 @item
551 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
552
553 @item
554 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
555 value based on the installed toolchain location.
556
557 @item
558 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
559 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
560
561 @item
562 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
563 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
564
565 @item
566 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
567
568 @item
569 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
570 compiler.
571
572 @item
573 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
574 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
575
576 @item
577 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
578 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
582 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
583 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/lib/}.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
592 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593 @file{/usr/lib/}.
594 @end enumerate
595
596 @node Run-time Target
597 @section Run-time Target Specification
598 @cindex run-time target specification
599 @cindex predefined macros
600 @cindex target specifications
601
602 @c prevent bad page break with this line
603 Here are run-time target specifications.
604
605 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
606 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
607 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
608 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
609 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
610 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
611 finished command line option processing your code can use those
612 results freely.
613
614 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
615 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
616 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
617 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
618
619 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
620 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
621 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
622 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
623 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
624 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
625 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
626 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
627 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
628 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
629
630 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
631 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
632 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
633 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
634 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
635 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
636 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
637 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
638 preprocessing.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target operating system instead.
644 @end defmac
645
646 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
649 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
650 it yourself.
651 @end defmac
652
653 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
654 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
655 any target-specific headers.
656 @end deftypevar
657
658 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
659 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
660 Its default setting is 0.
661 @end deftypevr
662
663 @cindex optional hardware or system features
664 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
665
666 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
667 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
668 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
669 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
670 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
671 definition does nothing but return true.
672
673 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
674 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
675 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
676 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
677 via attributes).
678 @end deftypefn
679
680 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
681 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
682 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
683 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
684 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
685 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
686 default definition does nothing but return false.
687
688 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
689 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
690 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
691 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
692 @end deftypefn
693
694 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
695
696 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
697
698 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
699
700 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
701
702 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
703
704 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
705
706 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
707 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
708 but is only used in the C
709 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
710 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
711 frontends.
712 @end defmac
713
714 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
715 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
716 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
717 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
718 options are processed once
719 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
720 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
721 options passed explicitly.
722
723 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
724 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
725 @code{optimize} attribute.
726 @end deftypevr
727
728 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
729
730 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
731
732 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
733 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
734 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
735 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
736 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
737 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
738
739 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
740 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
741 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
742 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
743 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
744 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
745 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
746
747 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
748 is 0.
749 @end defmac
750
751 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
752
753 @node Per-Function Data
754 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
755 @cindex per-function data
756 @cindex data structures
757
758 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
759 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
760 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
761 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
762 when another one comes along.
763
764 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
765 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
766 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
767 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
768 to their own specific data.
769
770 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
771 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
772 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
773 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
774
775 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
776 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
777 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
778 function, for level 0.
779
780 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
781 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
782 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
783 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
784 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
785 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
786 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
787 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
788 longer supported.
789
790 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
791 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
792 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
793 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
794 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
795 @end defmac
796
797 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
798 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
799 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
800 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
801 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
802 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
803
804 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
805 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
806 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
807 @end deftypevar
808
809 @node Storage Layout
810 @section Storage Layout
811 @cindex storage layout
812
813 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
814 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
815 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
816 @xref{Run-time Target}.
817
818 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
819 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
820 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
821 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
822 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
823 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
824 macro need not be a constant.
825
826 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
827 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
832 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
833 @end defmac
834
835 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
836 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
837 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
838 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
839 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
840 macro need not be a constant.
841 @end defmac
842
843 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
844 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
845 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
846 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
847 the order of words in memory.
848 @end defmac
849
850 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
851 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
852 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
853 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
854 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
855
856 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
857 multi-word integers.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
861 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
862 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
863 @end defmac
864
865 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
866 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
867 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
868 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
873 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
874 @end defmac
875
876 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
877 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
878 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
879 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
880 @end defmac
881
882 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
883 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
884 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
885 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
886 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
887 @end defmac
888
889 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
890 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
891 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
892 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
893 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
894 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
895 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
896
897 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
898 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
899 @end defmac
900
901 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
902 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
903 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
904 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
905 scalar type.
906
907 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
908 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
909 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
910 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
911 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
912 counterparts.
913
914 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
915 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
916 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
917 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
918 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
919 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
920
921 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
922 @end defmac
923
924 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
925
926 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
927
928 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
929 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
930 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
931 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
932 size of an integer.
933 @end defmac
934
935 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
936 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
937 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
938 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
939 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
940 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
941 @end defmac
942
943 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
944 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
945 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
946 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
947 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
948 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
949 @end defmac
950
951 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
952 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
953 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
954 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
955 @end defmac
956
957 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
958 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
959 @end defmac
960
961 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
962 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
963 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
964 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
965 @end defmac
966
967 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
968
969 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
970 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
971 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
972 @end defmac
973
974 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
975 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
976 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
977 @end defmac
978
979 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
980 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
981 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
982 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
983 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
984 @end defmac
985
986 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
987 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
988 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
989 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
990 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
991 @end defmac
992
993 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
994 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
995 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
996 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
997 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
998 field alignment has not been set by the
999 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1000 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1001 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1002 @end defmac
1003
1004 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1005 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1006 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1007
1008 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1009
1010 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1011 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1012 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1013 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1014 @end defmac
1015
1016 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1017 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1018 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1019 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1020 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1021
1022 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1023 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1024 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1025 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1026 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1027 @end defmac
1028
1029 @hook TARGET_STATIC_RTX_ALIGNMENT
1030
1031 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1032 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1033 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1034 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1035 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1036
1037 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1038
1039 @findex strcpy
1040 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1041 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1042 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1043 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1044 @end defmac
1045
1046 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1047 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1048 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1049 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1050 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1051
1052 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1053 @end defmac
1054
1055 @hook TARGET_CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
1056
1057 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1058 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1059 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1060 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1061 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1062
1063 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1064
1065 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1066 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1067
1068 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1069 @end defmac
1070
1071 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1072
1073 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1074 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1075 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1076 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1077 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1078 align the slot.
1079
1080 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1081 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1082 be used.
1083
1084 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1085 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1086
1087 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1088 @end defmac
1089
1090 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1091 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1092 variable @var{decl}.
1093
1094 If this macro is not defined, then
1095 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1096 is used.
1097
1098 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1099 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1100
1101 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1102 @end defmac
1103
1104 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1105 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1106 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1107 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1108
1109 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1110 @end defmac
1111
1112 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1113 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1114 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1115
1116 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1117 @end defmac
1118
1119 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1120 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1121 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1122
1123 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1124 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1125 @end defmac
1126
1127 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1128 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1129 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1130 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1131 @end defmac
1132
1133 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1134 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1135 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1136
1137 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1138 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1139 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1140 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1141 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1142
1143 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1144 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1145 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1146 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1147
1148 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1149 structure.
1150
1151 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1152 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1153
1154 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1155 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1156 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1157 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1158
1159 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1160 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1161 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1162
1163 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1164 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1165 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1166
1167 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1168 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1169 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1170
1171 @smallexample
1172 struct foo1
1173 @{
1174 char x;
1175 char :0;
1176 char y;
1177 @};
1178
1179 struct foo2
1180 @{
1181 char x;
1182 int :0;
1183 char y;
1184 @};
1185
1186 main ()
1187 @{
1188 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1189 sizeof (struct foo1));
1190 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1191 sizeof (struct foo2));
1192 exit (0);
1193 @}
1194 @end smallexample
1195
1196 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1197 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1198 @end defmac
1199
1200 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1201 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1202 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1203 @end defmac
1204
1205 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1206
1207 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1208
1209 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1210
1211 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1212 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1213 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1214 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1215 @var{specified}.
1216
1217 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1218 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1219 @end defmac
1220
1221 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1222 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1223 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1224 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1225 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1226 (DImode)} is assumed.
1227 @end defmac
1228
1229 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1230 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1231 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1232 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1233 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1234 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1235 having its mode specified.
1236
1237 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1238 would most commonly define this macro if the
1239 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1240 64-bit mode.
1241 @end defmac
1242
1243 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1244 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1245 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1246 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1247
1248 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1249 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1250 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1251 @end defmac
1252
1253 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1254
1255 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1256
1257 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1258
1259 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1260
1261 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1262
1263 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1264
1265 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1266
1267 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1268
1269 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1270
1271 @node Type Layout
1272 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1273
1274 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1275 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1276 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1277 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1278
1279 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1280 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1281 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1282 @end defmac
1283
1284 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1285 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1286 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1287 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1288 unit.)
1289 @end defmac
1290
1291 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1292 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1293 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1294 @end defmac
1295
1296 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1297 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1298 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1299 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1300 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1301 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1302 @end defmac
1303
1304 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1305 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1306 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1307 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1308 macro must be at least 64.
1309 @end defmac
1310
1311 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1312 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1313 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1314 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1315 @end defmac
1316
1317 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1318 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1319 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1320 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1321 @end defmac
1322
1323 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1324 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1325 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1326 @end defmac
1327
1328 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1329 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1330 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1331 words.
1332 @end defmac
1333
1334 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1335 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1336 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1337 words.
1338 @end defmac
1339
1340 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1341 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1342 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1343 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1344 @end defmac
1345
1346 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1347 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1348 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1349 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1350 @end defmac
1351
1352 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1353 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1354 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1355 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1356 @end defmac
1357
1358 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1359 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1360 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1361 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1362 @end defmac
1363
1364 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1365 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1366 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1367 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1368 @end defmac
1369
1370 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1371 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1372 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1373 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1374 @end defmac
1375
1376 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1377 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1378 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1379 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1380 @end defmac
1381
1382 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1383 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1384 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1385 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1386 @end defmac
1387
1388 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1389 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1390 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1391 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1392 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1393 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1394 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1395 @end defmac
1396
1397 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1398 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1399 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1400 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1401 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1402 is the default.
1403 @end defmac
1404
1405 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1406 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1407 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1408 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1409 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1410 @end defmac
1411
1412 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1413
1414 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1415 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1416 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1417 contents of the string.
1418
1419 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1420 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1421 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1422 of the data type names defined in the function
1423 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1424 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1425 compiler to crash on startup.
1426
1427 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1428 int"}.
1429 @end defmac
1430
1431 @defmac SIZETYPE
1432 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1433 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1434 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1435 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1436 is extracted.
1437
1438 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1439
1440 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1441 @end defmac
1442
1443 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1444 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1445 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1446 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1447 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1448
1449 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1450 @end defmac
1451
1452 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1453 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1454 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1455 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1456 information.
1457
1458 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1459 @end defmac
1460
1461 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1462 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1463 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1464 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1465 @end defmac
1466
1467 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1468 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1469 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1470 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1471 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1472 information.
1473
1474 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1475 @end defmac
1476
1477 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1478 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1479 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1480 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1481 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1482
1483 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1484 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1485 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1486 @end defmac
1487
1488 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1489 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1490 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1491 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1492 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1493
1494 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1495 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1496 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1497 int}.
1498 @end defmac
1499
1500 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1501 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1502 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1503 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1504 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1505 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1506 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1507 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1508 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1509 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1510 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1511 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1512 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1513 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1514 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1515 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1516 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1518 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1519 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1520 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1522 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1523 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1524 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1527 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1528 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1529 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1530 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1531 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1532 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1533 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1534 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1535 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1536 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1537
1538 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1539 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1540 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1541 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1542 these macros are null pointers.
1543 @end defmac
1544
1545 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1546 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1547 that looks like:
1548
1549 @smallexample
1550 struct @{
1551 union @{
1552 void (*fn)();
1553 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1554 @};
1555 ptrdiff_t delta;
1556 @};
1557 @end smallexample
1558
1559 @noindent
1560 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1561 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1562 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1563 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1564 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1565 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1566 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1567 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1568
1569 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1570 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1571 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1572 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1573 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1574 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1575 architecture, you should define this macro to
1576 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1577
1578 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1579 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1580 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1581 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1582 @end defmac
1583
1584 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1585 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1586 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1587 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1588 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1589 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1590 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1591
1592 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1593 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1594 @end defmac
1595
1596 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1597 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1598 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1599 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1600 when special alignment is necessary. */
1601 @end defmac
1602
1603 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1604 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1605 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1606 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1607 of words in each data entry.
1608 @end defmac
1609
1610 @node Registers
1611 @section Register Usage
1612 @cindex register usage
1613
1614 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1615 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1616
1617 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1618 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1619 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1620 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1621 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1622
1623 @menu
1624 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1625 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1626 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1627 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1628 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1629 @end menu
1630
1631 @node Register Basics
1632 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1633
1634 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1635 Registers have various characteristics.
1636
1637 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1638 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1639 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1640 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1641 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1642 @end defmac
1643
1644 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1645 @cindex fixed register
1646 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1647 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1648 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1649 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1650 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1651 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1652 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1653
1654 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1655 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1656 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1657
1658 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1659 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1660 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1661 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1662 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1663 @end defmac
1664
1665 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1666 @cindex call-used register
1667 @cindex call-clobbered register
1668 @cindex call-saved register
1669 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1670 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1671 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1672 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1673 function calls.
1674
1675 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1676 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1677 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1678 @end defmac
1679
1680 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1681 @cindex call-used register
1682 @cindex call-clobbered register
1683 @cindex call-saved register
1684 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1685 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1686 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1687 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1688 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1689 @end defmac
1690
1691 @cindex call-used register
1692 @cindex call-clobbered register
1693 @cindex call-saved register
1694 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1695
1696 @findex fixed_regs
1697 @findex call_used_regs
1698 @findex global_regs
1699 @findex reg_names
1700 @findex reg_class_contents
1701 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1702
1703 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1704 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1705 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1706 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1707 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1708 outbound register.
1709 @end defmac
1710
1711 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1712 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1713 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1714 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1715 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1716 register.
1717 @end defmac
1718
1719 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1720 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1721 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1722 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1723 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1724 gotos.
1725 @end defmac
1726
1727 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1728 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1729 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1730 @end defmac
1731
1732 @node Allocation Order
1733 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1734 @cindex order of register allocation
1735 @cindex register allocation order
1736
1737 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1738 Registers are allocated in order.
1739
1740 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1741 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1742 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1743 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1744
1745 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1746 (all else being equal).
1747
1748 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1749 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1750 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1751 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1752 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1753 @end defmac
1754
1755 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1756 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1757 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1758
1759 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1760 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1761 register; and so on.
1762
1763 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1764 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1765
1766 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1767 @end defmac
1768
1769 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1770 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1771 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1772 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1773 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1774 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1775 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1776 @end defmac
1777
1778 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1779 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1780 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1781 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1782 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1783 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1784 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1785 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1786
1787 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1788 @end defmac
1789
1790 @node Values in Registers
1791 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1792
1793 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1794 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1795 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1796
1797 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1798
1799 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1800 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1801 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1802 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1803 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1804 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1805 @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1806
1807 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1808 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1809 nonzero.
1810
1811 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1812 @code{subreg_get_info}
1813 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1814 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1815 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1816 registers and so not be representable.
1817 @end defmac
1818
1819 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1820 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1821 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1822 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1823 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1824 @end defmac
1825
1826 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1827 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1828 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1829 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1830 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1831 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1832 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1833 @end defmac
1834
1835 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1836
1837 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1838 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1839 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1840
1841 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1842 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1843 handler.
1844
1845 The default is always nonzero.
1846 @end defmac
1847
1848 @hook TARGET_MODES_TIEABLE_P
1849
1850 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1851
1852 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1853 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1854 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1855 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1856 @end defmac
1857
1858 @node Leaf Functions
1859 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1860
1861 @cindex leaf functions
1862 @cindex functions, leaf
1863 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1864 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1865 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1866 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1867 normally arrive.
1868
1869 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1870 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1871 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1872 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1873 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1874 functions''.
1875
1876 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1877 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1878 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1879 accomplish this.
1880
1881 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1882 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1883 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1884 function treatment.
1885
1886 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1887 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1888 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1889 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1890 in this vector.
1891
1892 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1893 the treatment of leaf functions.
1894 @end defmac
1895
1896 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1897 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1898 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1899
1900 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1901 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
1902 will cause the compiler to abort.
1903
1904 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1905 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1906 this.
1907 @end defmac
1908
1909 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1910 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1911 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
1912 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
1913 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
1914 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
1915 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
1916 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
1917 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
1918 functions which only use leaf registers.
1919 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
1920 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
1921 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1922 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1923 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1924
1925 @node Stack Registers
1926 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1927
1928 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1929 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
1930 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
1931 stack.
1932
1933 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1934 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
1935 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
1936 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
1937 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
1938 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
1939 with it, as well as defining these macros.
1940
1941 @defmac STACK_REGS
1942 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1943 @end defmac
1944
1945 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
1946 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
1947 the machine has any stack-like registers.
1948 @end defmac
1949
1950 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
1951 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1952 of the stack.
1953 @end defmac
1954
1955 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
1956 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1957 the stack.
1958 @end defmac
1959
1960 @node Register Classes
1961 @section Register Classes
1962 @cindex register class definitions
1963 @cindex class definitions, register
1964
1965 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1966 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1967 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1968 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1969
1970 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1971 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1972 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1973
1974 @findex ALL_REGS
1975 @findex NO_REGS
1976 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1977 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1978 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1979 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1980
1981 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1982 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1983 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1984 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1985 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1986 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1987
1988 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1989 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1990
1991 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1992 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1993 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1994 them in operand constraints.
1995
1996 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
1997 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
1998 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
1999 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2000 (@pxref{Costs}).
2001
2002 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2003 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2004 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2005 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2006 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2007 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2008 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2009
2010 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2011 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2012 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2013 in their union.
2014
2015 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2016 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2017 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2018 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2019 specify this requirement is with @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2020
2021 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2022 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2023 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2024 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2025 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2026 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2027 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2028 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2029 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2030
2031 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2032 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2033 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2034 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2035 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2036 tells how many classes there are.
2037
2038 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2039 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2040 in many of the tables described below.
2041 @end deftp
2042
2043 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2044 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2045
2046 @smallexample
2047 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2048 @end smallexample
2049 @end defmac
2050
2051 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2052 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2053 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2054 @end defmac
2055
2056 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2057 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2058 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2059 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2060 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2061
2062 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2063 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2064 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2065 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2066 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2067 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2068 so on.
2069 @end defmac
2070
2071 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2072 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2073 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2074 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2075 register.
2076 @end defmac
2077
2078 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2079 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2080 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2081 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2082 @end defmac
2083
2084 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2085 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2086 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2087 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2088 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2089 @end defmac
2090
2091 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2092 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2093 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2094 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2095 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2096 @end defmac
2097
2098 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2099 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2100 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2101 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2102 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2103 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2104 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2105 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2106 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2107 @end defmac
2108
2109 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2110 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2111 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2112 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2113 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2114 @end defmac
2115
2116 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2117 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2118 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2119 @end defmac
2120
2121 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2122 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2123 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2124 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2125 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2126 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2127 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2128 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2129 @code{address_operand}.
2130 @end defmac
2131
2132 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2133 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2134 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2135 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2136 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2137 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2138 than other base register uses.
2139
2140 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2141 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2142 @end defmac
2143
2144 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2145 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2146 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2147 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2148 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2149 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2150 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2151 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2152 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2153 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2154 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2155 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2156 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2157 @end defmac
2158
2159 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2160 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2161 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2162 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2163 allocated such a hard register.
2164
2165 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2166 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2167 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2168 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2169 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2170 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2171 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2172 only if neither labeling works.
2173 @end defmac
2174
2175 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2176
2177 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2178
2179 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2180 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2181 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2182 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2183 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2184 safe:
2185
2186 @smallexample
2187 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2188 @end smallexample
2189
2190 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2191 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2192 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2193 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2194 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2195
2196 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2197 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2198 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2199 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2200 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2201 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2202 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2203 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant cannot be loaded
2204 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2205 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2206 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2207
2208 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2209 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2210 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2211 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2212 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2213 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2214 @end defmac
2215
2216 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2217
2218 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2219 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2220 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2221 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2222 ordinarily be used.
2223
2224 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2225 there are certain modes that simply cannot go in certain reload classes.
2226
2227 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2228 smaller class.
2229
2230 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2231 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2232 @end defmac
2233
2234 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2235
2236 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2237 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2238 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2239 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2240 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2241
2242 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2243 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2244 reload phase that it may
2245 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2246 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2247 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2248 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2249 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2250 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2251
2252 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2253 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2254 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2255 class required. If the
2256 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2257 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2258 macros identically.
2259
2260 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2261 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2262 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2263 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2264 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2265
2266 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2267 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2268 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2269 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2270 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2271 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2272 register.
2273
2274 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2275 register that
2276 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2277 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2278 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2279 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2280 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2281
2282 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2283 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2284 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2285 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2286
2287 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2288 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2289 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2290 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2291 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2292 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2293 general registers.
2294 @end defmac
2295
2296 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2297
2298 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2299 Normally when @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2300 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2301 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2302 defined by this macro.
2303
2304 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2305 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2306 @end defmac
2307
2308 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2309
2310 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2311
2312 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2313
2314 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2315 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2316 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2317
2318 This is closely related to the macro @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2319 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2320 should be the maximum value of @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2321 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2322
2323 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2324 in the reload pass.
2325 @end defmac
2326
2327 @hook TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
2328
2329 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2330
2331 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2332
2333 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2334
2335 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2336
2337 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2338
2339 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2340
2341 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2342
2343 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2344
2345 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2346
2347 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2348
2349 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2350
2351 @node Stack and Calling
2352 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2353 @cindex calling conventions
2354
2355 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2356 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2357
2358 @menu
2359 * Frame Layout::
2360 * Exception Handling::
2361 * Stack Checking::
2362 * Frame Registers::
2363 * Elimination::
2364 * Stack Arguments::
2365 * Register Arguments::
2366 * Scalar Return::
2367 * Aggregate Return::
2368 * Caller Saves::
2369 * Function Entry::
2370 * Profiling::
2371 * Tail Calls::
2372 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2373 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2374 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2375 @end menu
2376
2377 @node Frame Layout
2378 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2379 @cindex stack frame layout
2380 @cindex frame layout
2381
2382 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2383 Here is the basic stack layout.
2384
2385 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2386 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2387 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2388 @end defmac
2389
2390 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2391 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2392 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2393 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2394
2395 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2396 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2397 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2398 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2399 space for the next item on the stack.
2400
2401 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2402 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2403 which is often wrong.
2404 @end defmac
2405
2406 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2407 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2408 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2409 @end defmac
2410
2411 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2412 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2413 addresses on the stack.
2414 @end defmac
2415
2416 @hook TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2417
2418 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2419 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2420 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2421
2422 On ports where @code{TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2423 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2424 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2425 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2426 @end defmac
2427
2428 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2429 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2430 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2431 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2432
2433 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2434 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2435 @end defmac
2436
2437 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2438 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2439 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2440 function.
2441
2442 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2443 the first argument's address.
2444 @end defmac
2445
2446 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2447 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2448 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2449
2450 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2451 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2452 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2453 @end defmac
2454
2455 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2456 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2457 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2458 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2459 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2460 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2461 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2462 @end defmac
2463
2464 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2465 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2466 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2467 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2468 itself.
2469
2470 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2471 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2472 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2473 @end defmac
2474
2475 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2476 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2477 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2478 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2479 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2480 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2481 @end defmac
2482
2483 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2484
2485 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2486 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2487 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2488 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2489 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2490 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2491 @end defmac
2492
2493 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2494 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2495 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2496 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2497 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2498 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2499
2500 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2501 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2502 determine the return address of other frames.
2503 @end defmac
2504
2505 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2506 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2507 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2508 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2509 @end defmac
2510
2511 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2512 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2513 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2514 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2515 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2516 the stack.
2517
2518 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2519 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2520
2521 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2522 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2523 @end defmac
2524
2525 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2526 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2527 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2528 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2529 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2530
2531 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2532 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2533 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2534 over time.
2535 @end defmac
2536
2537 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2538 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2539 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2540 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2541 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2542 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2543 @end defmac
2544
2545 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2546
2547 @hook TARGET_DWARF_POLY_INDETERMINATE_VALUE
2548
2549 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2550 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2551 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2552 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2553 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2554 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2555
2556 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2557 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2558 @end defmac
2559
2560 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2561 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2562 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2563 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2564 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2565 during virtual register instantiation.
2566
2567 The default value for this macro is
2568 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2569 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2570 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2571 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2572 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2573
2574 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2575 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2576 DWARF 2.
2577 @end defmac
2578
2579 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2580 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2581 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2582 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2583 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2584
2585 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2586 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2587 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2588 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2589 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2590 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2591 should be defined.
2592 @end defmac
2593
2594 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2595 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2596 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2597 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2598 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2599 @end defmac
2600
2601 @node Exception Handling
2602 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2603 @cindex exception handling
2604
2605 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2606 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2607 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2608 @var{N} registers are usable.
2609
2610 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2611 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2612 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2613 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2614 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2615
2616 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2617 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2618 @end defmac
2619
2620 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2621 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2622 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2623 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2624 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2625
2626 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2627 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2628
2629 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2630 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2631 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2632 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2633 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2634 that provided by DWARF 2.
2635 @end defmac
2636
2637 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2638 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2639 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2640 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2641
2642 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2643 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2644 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2645 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2646 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2647 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2648 target call frame.
2649
2650 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2651 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2652 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2653
2654 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2655 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2656 @end defmac
2657
2658 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2659 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2660 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2661 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2662 using it to return to the exception handler.
2663 @end defmac
2664
2665 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2666 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2667 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2668 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2669 and so may be read-only.
2670
2671 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2672 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2673 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2674 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2675
2676 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2677 represented directly.
2678 @end defmac
2679
2680 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2681 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2682 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2683 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2684 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2685
2686 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2687 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2688 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2689 to be emitted.
2690 @end defmac
2691
2692 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2693 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2694 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2695 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2696 through signal frames.
2697
2698 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2699 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2700 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2701 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2702 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2703 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2704 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2705 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2706 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2707
2708 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2709 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2710 @end defmac
2711
2712 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2713 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2714 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2715 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2716
2717 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2718 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2719 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2720 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2721 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2722 be updated in @var{fs}.
2723 @end defmac
2724
2725 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2726 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2727 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2728 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2729 @end defmac
2730
2731 @node Stack Checking
2732 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2733
2734 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2735 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2736 three ways:
2737
2738 @enumerate
2739 @item
2740 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2741 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2742 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2743 other special processing.
2744
2745 @item
2746 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2747 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2748 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2749 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2750 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2751 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2752 approach below.
2753
2754 @item
2755 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2756 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2757 @end enumerate
2758
2759 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2760 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2761 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2762 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2763
2764 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2765 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2766 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2767 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2768 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2769 value of this macro is zero.
2770 @end defmac
2771
2772 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2773 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2774 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2775 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2776 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2777 @end defmac
2778
2779 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2780 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2781 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2782 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2783 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2784 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2785 @end defmac
2786
2787 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2788 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2789 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2790 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2791 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2792 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2793 default value of this macro is zero.
2794 @end defmac
2795
2796 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2797 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2798 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2799 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2800 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2801 architectures and operating systems.
2802 @end defmac
2803
2804 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2805 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2806 in the opposite case.
2807
2808 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2809 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2810 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2811 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2812 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2813 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2814 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2815 @end defmac
2816
2817 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2818 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2819 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2820 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2821 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2822 use the default of four words.
2823 @end defmac
2824
2825 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2826 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2827 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2828 @option{-fstack-check}.
2829 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2830 normally not need to override that default.
2831 @end defmac
2832
2833 @hook TARGET_STACK_CLASH_PROTECTION_FINAL_DYNAMIC_PROBE
2834
2835 @need 2000
2836 @node Frame Registers
2837 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2838
2839 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2840 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2841
2842 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2843 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2844 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2845 the hardware determines which register this is.
2846 @end defmac
2847
2848 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2849 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2850 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2851 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2852 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2853 @end defmac
2854
2855 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2856 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2857 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2858 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2859 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2860 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2861 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2862 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2863 used for the frame pointer.
2864
2865 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2866 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2867 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2868 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2869 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2870 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2871 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2872
2873 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2874 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2875 @end defmac
2876
2877 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2878 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2879 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2880 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2881 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2882 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2883 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2884 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2885 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2886 @end defmac
2887
2888 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2889 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2890 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
2891 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2892 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2893 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2894 @end defmac
2895
2896 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
2897 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2898 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
2899 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
2900 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2901 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2902 @end defmac
2903
2904 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2905 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2906 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2907 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2908 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2909 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2910 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2911
2912 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2913 address from the stack.
2914 @end defmac
2915
2916 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2917 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2918 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2919 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2920 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2921 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2922 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2923 not be defined.
2924
2925 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2926
2927 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2928 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
2929 @end defmac
2930
2931 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
2932
2933 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2934 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
2935 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
2936 DWARF2 exception handling.
2937
2938 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
2939 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
2940 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
2941 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
2942 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
2943 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
2944 registers that are not call-saved.
2945
2946 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2947 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
2948 @end defmac
2949
2950 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2951
2952 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
2953 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
2954
2955 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2956 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
2957 @end defmac
2958
2959 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
2960
2961 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2962 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
2963 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
2964 column number to use instead.
2965 @end defmac
2966
2967 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
2968
2969 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2970 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
2971 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
2972 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
2973 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
2974
2975 @end defmac
2976
2977 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
2978
2979 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
2980 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
2981 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
2982 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
2983 return @code{@var{regno}}.
2984
2985 @end defmac
2986
2987 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
2988
2989 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
2990 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
2991 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
2992 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
2993
2994 @end defmac
2995
2996 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
2997
2998 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
2999 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3000 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3001 defined and 0 otherwise.
3002
3003 @end defmac
3004
3005 @node Elimination
3006 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3007
3008 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3009 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3010
3011 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3012
3013 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3014 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3015 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3016
3017 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3018 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3019
3020 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3021 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3022 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3023 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3024 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3025
3026 In this case, you might specify:
3027 @smallexample
3028 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3029 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3030 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3031 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3032 @end smallexample
3033
3034 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3035 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3036 @end defmac
3037
3038 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3039
3040 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3041 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3042 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3043 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3044 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3045 @end defmac
3046
3047 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_FRAME_LAYOUT
3048
3049 @node Stack Arguments
3050 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3051 @cindex arguments on stack
3052 @cindex stack arguments
3053
3054 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3055 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3056 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3057
3058 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3059
3060 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3061 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3062 outgoing arguments.
3063 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3064 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3065 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3066 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3067 @end defmac
3068
3069 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3070 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3071 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3072 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3073 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3074 @end defmac
3075
3076 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3077 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3078 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3079
3080 On some machines, the definition
3081
3082 @smallexample
3083 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3084 @end smallexample
3085
3086 @noindent
3087 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3088 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3089 alignment. Then the definition should be
3090
3091 @smallexample
3092 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3093 @end smallexample
3094
3095 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3096 @end defmac
3097
3098 @findex outgoing_args_size
3099 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3100 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3101 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3102 will be computed and placed into
3103 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3104 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3105 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3106
3107 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3108 is not proper.
3109 @end defmac
3110
3111 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3112 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3113 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3114 registers.
3115
3116 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3117 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3118 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3119 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3120 of the function.
3121
3122 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3123 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3124 which.
3125 @end defmac
3126 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3127 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3128
3129 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3130 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3131 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3132 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3133 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3134 @end defmac
3135
3136 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3137 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3138 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3139 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3140 if the function called is a library function.
3141
3142 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3143 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3144 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3145 @end defmac
3146
3147 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3148 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3149 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3150 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3151 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3152
3153 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3154 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3155 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3156 stack in its natural location.
3157 @end defmac
3158
3159 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3160
3161 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3162 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3163 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3164 when compiling a function call.
3165
3166 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3167 have been accumulated.
3168
3169 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3170 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3171 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3172 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3173 appropriate.
3174 @end defmac
3175
3176 @node Register Arguments
3177 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3178 @cindex arguments in registers
3179 @cindex registers arguments
3180
3181 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3182 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3183 the stack.
3184
3185 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3186
3187 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3188
3189 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3190
3191 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3192
3193 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3194
3195 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3196
3197 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3198
3199 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3200
3201 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3202 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3203 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3204 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3205 of bytes of argument so far.
3206
3207 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3208 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3209 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3210 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3211 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3212 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3213 @end defmac
3214
3215 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3216 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3217 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3218 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3219 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3220 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3221 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3222 @end defmac
3223
3224 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3225 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3226 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3227 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3228 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3229 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3230 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3231 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3232 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3233 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3234 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3235 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3236 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3237
3238 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3239 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3240 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3241 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3242 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3243 never both of them at once.
3244 @end defmac
3245
3246 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3247 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3248 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3249 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3250 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3251 0)} is used instead.
3252 @end defmac
3253
3254 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3255 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3256 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3257 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3258
3259 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3260 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3261 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3262 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3263 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3264 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3265 @end defmac
3266
3267 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3268
3269 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET
3270
3271 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3272
3273 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3274 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3275 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3276 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3277 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3278 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3279 @end defmac
3280
3281 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3282 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3283 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3284 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3285 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3286 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3287 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3288 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3289 required.
3290 @end defmac
3291
3292 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3293
3294 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3295
3296 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3297 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3298 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3299 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3300 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3301 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3302 stack.
3303 @end defmac
3304
3305 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3306
3307 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3308
3309 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3310
3311 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3312
3313 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3314
3315 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3316
3317 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3318
3319 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3320
3321 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3322
3323 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3324
3325 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3326
3327 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3328
3329 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3330
3331 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_BUILTIN_P
3332
3333 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3334
3335 @node Scalar Return
3336 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3337 @cindex return values in registers
3338 @cindex values, returned by functions
3339 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3340
3341 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3342 values---values that can fit in registers.
3343
3344 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3345
3346 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3347 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3348 a new target instead.
3349 @end defmac
3350
3351 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3352 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3353 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3354
3355 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3356 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3357 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3358 compiled.
3359 @end defmac
3360
3361 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3362
3363 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3364 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3365 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3366
3367 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3368 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3369 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3370 suffices:
3371
3372 @smallexample
3373 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3374 @end smallexample
3375
3376 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3377 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3378 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3379
3380 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3381 for a new target instead.
3382 @end defmac
3383
3384 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3385
3386 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3387 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3388 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3389 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3390 @end defmac
3391
3392 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3393
3394 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3395
3396 @node Aggregate Return
3397 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3398 @cindex aggregates as return values
3399 @cindex large return values
3400 @cindex returning aggregate values
3401 @cindex structure value address
3402
3403 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3404 cases), the value is not returned according to
3405 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3406 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3407 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3408 address}.
3409
3410 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3411 memory.
3412
3413 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3414
3415 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3416 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3417 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3418 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3419 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3420 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3421 target hook.
3422
3423 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3424 @end defmac
3425
3426 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3427
3428 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3429 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3430 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3431 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3432
3433 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3434 pass an address to the subroutine.
3435
3436 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3437 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3438 @end defmac
3439
3440 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3441
3442 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3443
3444 @hook TARGET_EMPTY_RECORD_P
3445
3446 @hook TARGET_WARN_PARAMETER_PASSING_ABI
3447
3448 @node Caller Saves
3449 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3450
3451 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3452 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3453 must live across calls.
3454
3455 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3456 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3457 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3458 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3459 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3460 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3461 @end defmac
3462
3463 @node Function Entry
3464 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3465 @cindex function entry and exit
3466 @cindex prologue
3467 @cindex epilogue
3468
3469 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3470 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3471
3472 @hook TARGET_ASM_PRINT_PATCHABLE_FUNCTION_ENTRY
3473
3474 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3475
3476 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3477
3478 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3479
3480 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3481
3482 @itemize @bullet
3483 @item
3484 @findex pretend_args_size
3485 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3486 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3487 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3488 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3489 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3490 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3491 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3492 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3493 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3494 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3495
3496 @item
3497 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3498 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3499 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3500 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3501 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3502 a save area.
3503
3504 @item
3505 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3506 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3507 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3508 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3509
3510 @item
3511 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3512 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3513 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3514 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3515 @end itemize
3516
3517 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3518 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3519 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3520 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3521 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3522 default is 0.
3523
3524 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3525 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3526 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3527 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3528 @end defmac
3529
3530 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3531 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3532 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3533 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3534 @end defmac
3535
3536 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3537 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3538 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3539 on entry to an exception edge.
3540 @end defmac
3541
3542 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3543
3544 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3545
3546 @node Profiling
3547 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3548 @cindex profiling, code generation
3549
3550 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3551
3552 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3553 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3554 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3555
3556 @findex mcount
3557 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3558 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3559 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3560 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3561
3562 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3563 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3564 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3565 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3566 @end defmac
3567
3568 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3569 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3570 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3571 not support profiling.
3572 @end defmac
3573
3574 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3575 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3576 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3577 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3578 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3579 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3580 @end defmac
3581
3582 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3583 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3584 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3585 @end defmac
3586
3587 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3588
3589 @node Tail Calls
3590 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3591 @cindex tail calls
3592
3593 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3594
3595 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3596
3597 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3598
3599 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3600
3601 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3602 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3603 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3604
3605 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3606 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3607 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3608 up the static chain, etc.
3609
3610 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3611 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3612 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3613 independent parts of GCC.
3614
3615 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3616 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3617 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3618 paths where this would unnecessary.
3619
3620 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3621 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3622 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3623 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3624 generic code.
3625
3626 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3627
3628 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3629
3630 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3631
3632 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3633
3634 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3635
3636 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3637
3638 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3639 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3640 @cindex stack smashing protection
3641
3642 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3643
3644 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3645
3646 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3647
3648 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3649
3650 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3651 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3652 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3653
3654 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3655
3656 @node Varargs
3657 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3658 @cindex varargs implementation
3659
3660 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3661 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3662 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3663 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3664 conditionals to include it.
3665
3666 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3667 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3668 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3669 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3670 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3671 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3672
3673 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3674 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3675 below.
3676
3677 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3678 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3679 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3680 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3681 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3682
3683 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3684 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3685 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3686 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3687
3688 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3689 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3690 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3691 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3692 to use them for its own purposes.
3693 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3694 @c 10feb93
3695 @end defmac
3696
3697 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3698 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3699 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3700 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3701 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3702 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3703 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3704 of the current function.
3705 @end defmac
3706
3707 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3708 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3709 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3710 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3711 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3712 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3713
3714 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3715 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3716 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3717
3718 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3719 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3720 @end defmac
3721
3722 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3723
3724 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3725
3726 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3727
3728 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3729
3730 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3731
3732 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3733
3734 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3735
3736 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3737
3738 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3739
3740 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3741
3742 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3743
3744 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3745
3746 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3747
3748 @node Trampolines
3749 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3750 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3751 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3752
3753 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3754 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3755 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3756 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3757 trampoline.
3758
3759 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3760 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3761 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3762 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3763 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3764 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3765 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3766 operands.
3767
3768 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3769 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3770 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3771 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3772 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3773 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3774 separately.
3775
3776 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3777
3778 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3779 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3780 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3781 @end defmac
3782
3783 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3784 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3785 @end defmac
3786
3787 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3788 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3789
3790 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3791 is used for aligning trampolines.
3792 @end defmac
3793
3794 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3795
3796 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3797
3798 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3799
3800 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3801 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3802 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3803 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3804
3805 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3806 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3807 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3808 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3809 latter makes initialization faster.
3810
3811 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3812 the following macro.
3813
3814 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3815 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3816 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3817 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3818 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3819 @end defmac
3820
3821 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3822 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3823 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3824 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3825 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3826
3827 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3828 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3829 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3830 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3831 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3832
3833 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3834 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3835 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3836 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3837 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3838 special assembler code.
3839 @end defmac
3840
3841 @node Library Calls
3842 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3843 @cindex library subroutine names
3844 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3845
3846 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3847 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3848
3849 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3850 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3851 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3852 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3853 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3854 @end defmac
3855
3856 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3857 @findex init_one_libfunc
3858 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3859
3860 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3861
3862 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3863 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3864 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3865 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3866 return a tristate.
3867
3868 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
3869 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
3870 don't need to define this macro.
3871 @end defmac
3872
3873 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
3874 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
3875 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
3876 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
3877 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
3878 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
3879 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
3880 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
3881 @end defmac
3882
3883 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
3884 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
3885 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3886 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
3887 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3888 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
3889 @end defmac
3890
3891 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
3892 @findex matherr
3893 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
3894 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
3895 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
3896 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
3897 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
3898 system.
3899
3900 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
3901 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
3902 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
3903 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
3904 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
3905 @end defmac
3906
3907 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
3908 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3909 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
3910 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
3911 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
3912 macro, a reasonable default is used.
3913 @end defmac
3914
3915 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
3916
3917 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
3918 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
3919 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
3920 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
3921 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
3922 the NeXT runtime installed.
3923
3924 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
3925 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
3926 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
3927
3928 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
3929 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
3930 @end defmac
3931
3932 @node Addressing Modes
3933 @section Addressing Modes
3934 @cindex addressing modes
3935
3936 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3937 This is about addressing modes.
3938
3939 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
3940 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
3941 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
3942 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
3943 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
3944 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
3945 @end defmac
3946
3947 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
3948 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
3949 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
3950 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
3951 the size of the memory operand.
3952 @end defmac
3953
3954 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
3955 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
3956 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
3957 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
3958 @end defmac
3959
3960 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
3961 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
3962 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
3963 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
3964 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
3965 constant addresses are supported.
3966 @end defmac
3967
3968 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
3969 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
3970 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
3971 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
3972 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
3973 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
3974 @end defmac
3975
3976 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
3977 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
3978 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
3979 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
3980 accept.
3981 @end defmac
3982
3983 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
3984
3985 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
3986 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
3987 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
3988 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
3989 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
3990 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
3991 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
3992 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
3993 @code{'m'} constraint.
3994 @end defmac
3995
3996 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
3997 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
3998 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
3999 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4000 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4001
4002 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4003 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4004
4005 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4006 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4007 @end defmac
4008
4009 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4010
4011 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4012 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4013 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4014 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4015 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4016 performance reasons.
4017
4018 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4019 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4020 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4021 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4022 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4023 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4024 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4025 be shared.
4026
4027 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4028 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4029 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4030 of reload internals.
4031
4032 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4033 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4034 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4035
4036 @findex push_reload
4037 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4038 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4039 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4040
4041 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4042 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4043 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4044 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4045 @code{push_reload}.
4046
4047 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4048 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4049 the address has become legitimate.
4050
4051 @findex copy_rtx
4052 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4053 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4054 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4055 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4056 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4057 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4058 @end defmac
4059
4060 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4061
4062 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4063
4064 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4065
4066 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4067
4068 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4069
4070 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4071
4072 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4073
4074 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4075
4076 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4077
4078 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4079
4080 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
4081
4082 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4083
4084 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST
4085
4086 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4087
4088 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4089
4090 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4091
4092 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4093
4094 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4095
4096 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4097
4098 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4099
4100 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4101
4102 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4103
4104 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4105
4106 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4107
4108 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4109
4110 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4111
4112 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4113
4114 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4115
4116 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4117
4118 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4119
4120 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4121
4122 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4123
4124 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4125
4126 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4127
4128 @node Anchored Addresses
4129 @section Anchored Addresses
4130 @cindex anchored addresses
4131 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4132
4133 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4134 For example, if we have:
4135
4136 @smallexample
4137 static int a, b, c;
4138 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4139 @end smallexample
4140
4141 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4142 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4143 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4144 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4145 be something like:
4146
4147 @smallexample
4148 int foo (void)
4149 @{
4150 register int *xr = &x;
4151 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4152 @}
4153 @end smallexample
4154
4155 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4156 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4157
4158 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4159 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4160 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4161 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4162
4163 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4164
4165 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4166
4167 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4168
4169 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4170
4171 @node Condition Code
4172 @section Condition Code Status
4173 @cindex condition code status
4174
4175 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4176 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4177
4178 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4179 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4180 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4181 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4182 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4183 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4184 most RISC machines.
4185
4186 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4187 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4188 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4189 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4190 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4191 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4192
4193 These restrictions can prevent important
4194 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4195 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4196 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4197 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4198 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4199
4200 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4201 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4202 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4203 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4204 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4205 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4206 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4207
4208 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4209 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4210 interested in most macros in this section.
4211
4212 @menu
4213 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4214 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4215 @end menu
4216
4217 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4218 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4219 @findex cc0
4220
4221 @findex cc_status
4222 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4223 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4224 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4225 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4226 currently based, and several standard flags.
4227
4228 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4229 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4230 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4231
4232 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4233 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4234 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4235
4236 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4237 @end defmac
4238
4239 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4240 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4241 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4242 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4243 define this macro to initialize it.
4244
4245 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4246 @end defmac
4247
4248 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4249 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4250 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4251 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4252 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4253 set @code{(cc0)}.
4254
4255 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4256
4257 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4258 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4259 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4260 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4261 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4262 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4263 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4264 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4265 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4266 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4267 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4268 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4269 condition code value.
4270
4271 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4272 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4273 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4274 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4275 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4276 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4277 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4278
4279 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4280 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4281 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4282 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4283 @end defmac
4284
4285 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4286 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4287 @findex CCmode
4288 @findex MODE_CC
4289
4290 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4291 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4292 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4293 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4294 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4295 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4296 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4297 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4298 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4299 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4300 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4301
4302 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4303 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4304 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4305 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4306 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4307 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4308 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4309
4310 @smallexample
4311 (define_insn ""
4312 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4313 (compare:CCNZ
4314 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4315 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4316 (const_int 0)))]
4317 ""
4318 "@dots{}")
4319 @end smallexample
4320
4321 @noindent
4322 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4323 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4324
4325 @smallexample
4326 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4327 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4328 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4329 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4330 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4331 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4332 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4333 @end smallexample
4334
4335 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4336 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4337 this section.
4338
4339 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4340 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4341 @end defmac
4342
4343 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4344
4345 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4346 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4347 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4348 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4349 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4350
4351 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4352 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4353 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4354 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4355
4356 @smallexample
4357 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4358 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4359 @end smallexample
4360 @end defmac
4361
4362 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4363 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4364 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4365 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4366 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4367 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4368 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4369 like:
4370
4371 @smallexample
4372 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4373 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4374 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4375 @end smallexample
4376 @end defmac
4377
4378 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4379
4380 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4381
4382 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4383
4384 @node Costs
4385 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4386 @cindex costs of instructions
4387 @cindex relative costs
4388 @cindex speed of instructions
4389
4390 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4391 on the target machine.
4392
4393 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4394 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4395 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4396 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4397 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4398 that.
4399
4400 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4401 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4402 registers if they are not general registers.
4403
4404 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4405 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4406 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4407 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4408 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4409 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4410
4411 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4412 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4413 @end defmac
4414
4415 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4416
4417 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4418 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4419 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4420 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4421 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4422 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4423 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4424
4425 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4426 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4427 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4428 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4429 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4430 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4431
4432 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4433 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4434 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4435 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4436 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4437 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4438 are the same as to this macro.
4439
4440 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4441 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4442 @end defmac
4443
4444 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4445
4446 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4447 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4448 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4449 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4450 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4451 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4452 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4453 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4454 @end defmac
4455
4456 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4457 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4458 ordinarily expect.
4459
4460 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4461 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4462 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4463 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4464 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4465 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4466
4467 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4468 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4469 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4470 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4471 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4472 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4473 @end defmac
4474
4475 @hook TARGET_SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4476
4477 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4478 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4479 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4480 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4481 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4482
4483 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4484 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4485 the number of such sequences.
4486
4487 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4488 optimized for speed rather than size.
4489
4490 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4491 @end defmac
4492
4493 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4494
4495 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4496
4497 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4498 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4499 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4500 @end defmac
4501
4502 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4503 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4504 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4505 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4506 @end defmac
4507
4508 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4509 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4510 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4511 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4512 @end defmac
4513
4514 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4515 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4516 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4517 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4518 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4519
4520 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4521 optimized for speed rather than size.
4522
4523 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4524 @end defmac
4525
4526 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4527 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4528 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4529 a block set insn or a library call.
4530 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4531 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4532
4533 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4534 optimized for speed rather than size.
4535
4536 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4537 @end defmac
4538
4539 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4540 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4541 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4542 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4543 @end defmac
4544
4545 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4546 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4547 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4548 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4549 @end defmac
4550
4551 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4552 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4553 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4554 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4555 @end defmac
4556
4557 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4558 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4559 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4560 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4561 @end defmac
4562
4563 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4564 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4565 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4566 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4567 @end defmac
4568
4569 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4570 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4571 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4572 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4573 @end defmac
4574
4575 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4576 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4577 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4578 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4579 @end defmac
4580
4581 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4582 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4583 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4584 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4585 @end defmac
4586
4587 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4588 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4589 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4590 @end defmac
4591
4592 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4593 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4594 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4595 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4596 @end defmac
4597
4598 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4599
4600 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4601
4602 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4603
4604 @hook TARGET_INSN_COST
4605
4606 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4607
4608 @hook TARGET_NOCE_CONVERSION_PROFITABLE_P
4609
4610 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4611
4612 @hook TARGET_ESTIMATED_POLY_VALUE
4613
4614 @node Scheduling
4615 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4616
4617 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4618 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4619 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4620 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4621
4622 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4623
4624 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4625
4626 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4627
4628 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4629
4630 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4631
4632 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4633
4634 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4635
4636 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4637
4638 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4639
4640 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4641
4642 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4643
4644 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4645
4646 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4647
4648 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4649
4650 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4651
4652 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4653
4654 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4655
4656 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4657
4658 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4659
4660 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4661
4662 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4663
4664 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4665
4666 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4667
4668 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4669
4670 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4671
4672 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4673
4674 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4675
4676 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4677
4678 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4679
4680 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4681
4682 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4683
4684 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4685
4686 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4687
4688 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4689
4690 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4691
4692 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4693
4694 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4695
4696 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4697
4698 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4699
4700 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4701
4702 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4703
4704 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4705
4706 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4707
4708 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4709
4710 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4711
4712 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4713
4714 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4715
4716 @node Sections
4717 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4718 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4719 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4720
4721 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4722 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4723 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4724 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4725 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4726 of sections.
4727
4728 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4729 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4730 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4731 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4732 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4733 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4734 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4735
4736 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4737 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4738 to be string literals.
4739
4740 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4741 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4742 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4743 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4744
4745 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4746 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4747 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4748 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4749 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4750 reuse @code{text_section}.
4751
4752 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4753 if the target does not provide them.
4754
4755 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4756 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4757 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4758 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4759 @end defmac
4760
4761 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4762 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4763 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4764 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4765 @end defmac
4766
4767 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4768 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4769 executed functions in the program.
4770 @end defmac
4771
4772 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4773 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4774 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4775 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4776 @end defmac
4777
4778 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4779 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4780 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4781 initialized, writable small data.
4782 @end defmac
4783
4784 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4785 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4786 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4787 data.
4788 @end defmac
4789
4790 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4791 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4792 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4793 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4794 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4795 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4796 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4797 used.
4798 @end defmac
4799
4800 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4801 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4802 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4803 uninitialized, writable small data.
4804 @end defmac
4805
4806 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4807 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4808 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4809 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4810 @end defmac
4811
4812 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4813 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4814 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4815 default is @code{'T'}.
4816 @end defmac
4817
4818 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4819 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4820 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4821 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4822 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4823 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4824 @end defmac
4825
4826 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4827 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4828 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4829 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4830 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4831 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4832 @end defmac
4833
4834 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4835 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4836 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4837 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4838 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4839 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4840 @end defmac
4841
4842 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4843 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4844 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4845 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4846 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4847 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4848 @end defmac
4849
4850 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4851 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4852 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4853 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4854 @end defmac
4855
4856 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4857 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4858 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4859 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4860 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4861 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4862 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4863 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4864 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4865 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4866 @end defmac
4867
4868 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4869 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4870 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4871 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4872 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4873 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4874 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4875 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4876 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4877 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4878 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4879 @end defmac
4880
4881 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4882 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4883 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4884 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4885 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4886 @end defmac
4887
4888 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4889 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4890 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4891 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4892 readonly data section is used.
4893
4894 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4895 @end defmac
4896
4897 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4898
4899 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4900
4901 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4902
4903 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
4904 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
4905 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
4906
4907 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
4908 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
4909 it is unlikely to be called.
4910 @end defmac
4911
4912 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
4913
4914 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
4915
4916 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
4917
4918 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
4919
4920 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4921
4922 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
4923
4924 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4925
4926 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4927
4928 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
4929
4930 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
4931
4932 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
4933
4934 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
4935
4936 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
4937
4938
4939 @node PIC
4940 @section Position Independent Code
4941 @cindex position independent code
4942 @cindex PIC
4943
4944 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
4945 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
4946 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
4947 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
4948 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
4949 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
4950 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
4951 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
4952 relative addresses.
4953 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
4954 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
4955
4956 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4957 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
4958 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
4959 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
4960 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
4961 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
4962 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
4963 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
4964 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
4965 @end defmac
4966
4967 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4968 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
4969 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
4970 the default is zero. Do not define
4971 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
4972 @end defmac
4973
4974 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
4975 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
4976 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
4977 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
4978 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
4979 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
4980 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
4981 position independent code.
4982 @end defmac
4983
4984 @node Assembler Format
4985 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
4986
4987 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
4988 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
4989 instructions do.
4990
4991 @menu
4992 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
4993 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
4994 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
4995 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
4996 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
4997 and termination routines.
4998 * Macros for Initialization::
4999 Specific macros that control the handling of
5000 initialization and termination routines.
5001 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5002 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5003 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5004 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5005 @end menu
5006
5007 @node File Framework
5008 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5009 @cindex assembler format
5010 @cindex output of assembler code
5011
5012 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5013 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5014
5015 @findex default_file_start
5016 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5017
5018 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5019
5020 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5021
5022 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5023
5024 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5025 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5026 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5027 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5028 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5029 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5030 this function.
5031 @end deftypefun
5032
5033 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5034
5035 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5036
5037 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5038
5039 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5040 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5041 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5042 the end of the line.
5043 @end defmac
5044
5045 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5046 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5047 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5048 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5049 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5050 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5051 @end defmac
5052
5053 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5054 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5055 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5056 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5057 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5058 @end defmac
5059
5060 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5061 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5062 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5063 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5064
5065 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5066 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5067 @end defmac
5068
5069 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5070
5071 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5072
5073 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5074 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5075 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5076 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5077 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5078 of the filename using this macro.
5079 @end defmac
5080
5081 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5082
5083 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5084
5085 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5086
5087 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5088
5089 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5090 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5091 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5092 @end deftypevr
5093
5094 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5095 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5096
5097 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5098
5099 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5100
5101 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5102
5103 @need 2000
5104 @node Data Output
5105 @subsection Output of Data
5106
5107
5108 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5109
5110 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5111
5112 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5113
5114 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5115
5116 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5117 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5118 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5119 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5120 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5121
5122 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5123 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5124 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5125 @end defmac
5126
5127 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5128 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5129 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5130 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5131 @end defmac
5132
5133 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5134 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5135 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5136 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5137 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5138 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5139 pool before the function.
5140 @end defmac
5141
5142 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5143 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5144 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5145 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5146 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5147 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5148 immediately after this call.
5149
5150 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5151 not be defined.
5152 @end defmac
5153
5154 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5155 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5156 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5157 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5158
5159 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5160 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5161 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5162 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5163 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5164 alignment.
5165
5166 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5167 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5168 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5169 Here is how to do this:
5170
5171 @smallexample
5172 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5173 @end smallexample
5174
5175 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5176 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5177 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5178
5179 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5180 @end defmac
5181
5182 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5183 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5184 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5185 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5186 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5187 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5188
5189 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5190 define this macro.
5191 @end defmac
5192
5193 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5194 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5195 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5196 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5197 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5198
5199 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5200 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5201 @end defmac
5202
5203 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5204
5205 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5206 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5207
5208 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5209 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5210 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5211 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5212 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5213 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5214 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5215 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5216 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5217 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5218 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5219 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5220 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5221 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5222 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5223 on the host machine.
5224
5225 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5226 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5227 machine's memory.
5228 @end defmac
5229
5230 @node Uninitialized Data
5231 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5232
5233 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5234 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5235
5236 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5237 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5238 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5239 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5240 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5241 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5242 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5243 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5244 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5245 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5246 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5247 an ordinary undefined external.
5248
5249 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5250 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5251 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5252
5253 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5254 common global variables are output.
5255 @end defmac
5256
5257 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5258 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5259 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5260 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5261 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5262 as the number of bits.
5263 @end defmac
5264
5265 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5266 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5267 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5268 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5269 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5270 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5271 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5272 @end defmac
5273
5274 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5275 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5276 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5277 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5278 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5279
5280 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5281 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5282 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5283 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5284 the name, and a newline.
5285
5286 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5287 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5288 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5289 You do not need to do both.
5290
5291 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5292 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5293 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5294 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5295 common in order to save space in the object file.
5296 @end defmac
5297
5298 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5299 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5300 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5301 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5302 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5303
5304 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5305 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5306 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5307
5308 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5309 static variables are output.
5310 @end defmac
5311
5312 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5313 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5314 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5315 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5316 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5317 as the number of bits.
5318 @end defmac
5319
5320 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5321 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5322 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5323 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5324 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5325 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5326 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5327 @end defmac
5328
5329 @node Label Output
5330 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5331
5332 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5333 This is about outputting labels.
5334
5335 @findex assemble_name
5336 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5337 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5338 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5339 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5340 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5341 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5342 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5343 @end defmac
5344
5345 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5346 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5347 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5348 a function.
5349 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5350 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5351 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5352 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5353
5354 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5355 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5356 @end defmac
5357
5358 @findex assemble_name_raw
5359 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5360 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5361 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5362 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5363 that it is more efficient.
5364 @end defmac
5365
5366 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5367 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5368 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5369 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5370 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5371
5372 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5373 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5374 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5375 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5376 define this macro.
5377 @end defmac
5378
5379 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5380 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5381 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5382 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5383 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5384 provided.
5385 @end defmac
5386
5387 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5388 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5389 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5390 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5391 address.
5392
5393 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5394 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5395 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5396 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5397 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5398 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5399 @end defmac
5400
5401 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5402 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5403 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5404 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5405 @samp{.} is used instead.
5406 @end defmac
5407
5408 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5409 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5410 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5411 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5412 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5413 @end defmac
5414
5415 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5416 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5417 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5418 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5419 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5420
5421 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5422 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5423 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5424 types at all, do not define this macro.
5425 @end defmac
5426
5427 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5428 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5429 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5430 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5431 the default is not to define this macro.
5432
5433 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5434 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5435 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5436 types at all, do not define this macro.
5437 @end defmac
5438
5439 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5440 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5441 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5442 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5443 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5444 you should not count on this.
5445
5446 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5447 definition of this macro is provided.
5448 @end defmac
5449
5450 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5451 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5452 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5453 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5454 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5455 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5456 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5457
5458 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5459 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5460
5461 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5462 of this macro.
5463 @end defmac
5464
5465 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5466 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5467 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5468 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5469 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5470 representing the function.
5471
5472 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5473
5474 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5475 of this macro.
5476 @end defmac
5477
5478 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5479 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5480 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5481 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5482 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5483 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5484 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5485
5486 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5487 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5488
5489 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5490 of this macro.
5491 @end defmac
5492
5493 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5494 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5495 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5496 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5497 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5498 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5499
5500 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5501
5502 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5503 of this macro.
5504 @end defmac
5505
5506 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5507 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5508 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5509 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5510 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5511 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5512
5513 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5514 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5515
5516 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5517 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5518 @end defmac
5519
5520 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5521
5522 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5523 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5524 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5525 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5526
5527 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5528 nothing.
5529 @end defmac
5530
5531 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5532 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5533 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5534 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5535 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5536 something about the size of the object.
5537
5538 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5539 nothing.
5540
5541 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5542 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5543 @end defmac
5544
5545 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5546
5547 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5548
5549 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5550
5551 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5552 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5553 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5554 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5555 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5556 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5557 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5558 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5559
5560 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5561 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5562 macro.
5563 @end defmac
5564
5565 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5566 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5567 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5568 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5569 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5570 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5571 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5572 to make @var{name} weak.
5573 @end defmac
5574
5575 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5576 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5577 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5578 declaration of @code{name}.
5579 @end defmac
5580
5581 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5582 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5583 supports weak symbols.
5584
5585 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5586 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5587 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5588 @end defmac
5589
5590 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5591 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5592
5593 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5594 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5595 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5596 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5597 @end defmac
5598
5599 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5600 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5601 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5602 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5603 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5604 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5605 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5606 @end defmac
5607
5608 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5609 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5610 semantics.
5611
5612 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5613 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5614 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5615 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5616 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5617 be emitted as one-only.
5618 @end defmac
5619
5620 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5621
5622 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5623 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5624 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5625 The default is @code{0}.
5626
5627 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5628 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5629 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5630 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5631 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5632 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5633 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5634
5635 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5636 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5637 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5638 table of contents.
5639 @end defmac
5640
5641 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5642 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5643 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5644 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5645 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5646 declaration.
5647
5648 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5649 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5650 @end defmac
5651
5652 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5653
5654 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5655
5656 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5657 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5658 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5659 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5660 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5661 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5662 @end defmac
5663
5664 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5665
5666 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5667 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5668 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5669 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5670 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5671 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5672 @end defmac
5673
5674 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5675 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5676 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5677 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5678 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5679 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5680 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5681 being taken.
5682 @end defmac
5683
5684 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5685
5686 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5687 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5688 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5689 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5690 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5691 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5692 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5693 bundles.
5694
5695 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5696 used.
5697 @end defmac
5698
5699 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5700 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5701 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5702
5703 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5704 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5705 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5706
5707 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5708 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5709 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5710 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5711 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5712 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5713 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5714 @end defmac
5715
5716 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5717 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5718 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5719 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5720 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5721
5722 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5723 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5724 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5725 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5726 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5727 internal static variables in different scopes.
5728
5729 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5730 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5731 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5732 between the name and the number will suffice.
5733
5734 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5735 which is correct for most systems.
5736 @end defmac
5737
5738 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5739 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5740 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5741
5742 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5743 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5744 correct for most systems.
5745 @end defmac
5746
5747 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5748 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5749 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5750 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5751 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5752 the tree nodes are available.
5753
5754 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5755 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5756 correct for most systems.
5757 @end defmac
5758
5759 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5760 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5761 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5762 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5763 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5764 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5765 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5766 @end defmac
5767
5768 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5769 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5770 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5771 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5772 an undefined weak symbol.
5773
5774 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5775 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5776 @end defmac
5777
5778 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5779 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5780 Objective-C methods.
5781
5782 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5783 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5784 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5785 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5786
5787 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5788 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5789 systems define other ways of computing names.
5790
5791 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5792 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5793 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5794 50 characters extra.
5795
5796 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5797 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5798 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5799 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5800
5801 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5802 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5803 @end defmac
5804
5805 @node Initialization
5806 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5807 @cindex initialization routines
5808 @cindex termination routines
5809 @cindex constructors, output of
5810 @cindex destructors, output of
5811
5812 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5813 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5814 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5815 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5816 @code{main} is called.
5817
5818 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5819 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5820 terminates.
5821
5822 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5823 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5824 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5825 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5826
5827 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5828 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5829 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5830
5831 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5832 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5833 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5834 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5835 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5836
5837 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5838 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5839 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5840 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5841 pointer containing zero.
5842
5843 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5844 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5845 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5846 list; destructors in forward order.
5847
5848 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5849 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5850 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5851 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5852 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5853 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5854 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5855 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5856
5857 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5858 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5859 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5860 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5861 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5862
5863 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5864 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5865 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5866 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5867 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5868
5869 @smallexample
5870 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5871 @end smallexample
5872
5873 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5874 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5875 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5876 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5877 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5878
5879 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5880 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5881 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5882 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5883 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5884 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5885
5886 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5887 macro properly.
5888
5889 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5890 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5891 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5892 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5893 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5894 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5895
5896 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5897 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5898 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5899 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5900 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5901 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5902 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5903 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5904 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5905 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5906 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5907 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5908 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5909 the initialization process.
5910
5911 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5912 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5913 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
5914 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
5915 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
5916 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
5917 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
5918 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
5919 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
5920 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
5921 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
5922
5923 @ifinfo
5924 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5925 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5926 @end ifinfo
5927
5928 @node Macros for Initialization
5929 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5930
5931 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5932 and termination functions:
5933
5934 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5935 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
5936 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
5937 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
5938 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
5939 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
5940 run the initialization functions.
5941 @end defmac
5942
5943 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
5944 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5945 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
5946 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5947 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5948 @end defmac
5949
5950 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
5951 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5952 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
5953 @end defmac
5954
5955 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
5956 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5957 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
5958 @end defmac
5959
5960 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
5961 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
5962 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
5963 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
5964 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
5965 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
5966
5967 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
5968 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
5969 exception tables embedded in the code.
5970 @end defmac
5971
5972 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
5973 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
5974 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
5975 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
5976 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
5977 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
5978 @end defmac
5979
5980 @defmac INVOKE__main
5981 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
5982 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
5983 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
5984 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
5985 @end defmac
5986
5987 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
5988 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
5989 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
5990 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
5991 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
5992 @end defmac
5993
5994 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
5995
5996 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
5997
5998 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
5999
6000 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6001 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6002
6003 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6004 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6005 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6006
6007 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6008 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6009
6010 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6011 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6012 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6013 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6014
6015 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6016 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6017 @end defmac
6018
6019 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6020 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6021 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6022 @command{nm}.
6023 @end defmac
6024
6025 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6026 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6027 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6028 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6029 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6030 produces.
6031 @end defmac
6032
6033 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6034 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6035 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6036 termination functions in shared libraries:
6037
6038 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6039 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6040 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6041 @end defmac
6042
6043 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6044 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6045 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6046 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6047 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6048 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6049 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6050 @end defmac
6051
6052 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6053 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6054 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6055 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6056 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6057 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6058 @end defmac
6059
6060 @node Instruction Output
6061 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6062
6063 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6064 This describes assembler instruction output.
6065
6066 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6067 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6068 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6069 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6070 @end defmac
6071
6072 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6073 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6074 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6075 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6076 to registers using alternate names.
6077 @end defmac
6078
6079 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6080 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6081 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6082 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6083 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6084 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6085 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6086 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6087
6088 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6089 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6090 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6091 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6092 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6093 @end defmac
6094
6095 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6096 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6097 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6098
6099 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6100 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6101 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6102 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6103 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6104 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6105 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6106 so that it will not be output twice.
6107
6108 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6109 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6110 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6111 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6112 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6113
6114 @findex recog_data.operand
6115 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6116 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6117
6118 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6119 in the usual way.
6120 @end defmac
6121
6122 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6123 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6124 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6125 they will be output differently.
6126
6127 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6128 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6129 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6130 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6131 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6132 by changing the contents of the vector.
6133
6134 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6135 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6136 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6137 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6138 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6139 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6140
6141 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6142 @end defmac
6143
6144 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6145
6146 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6147 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6148 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6149 RTL expression.
6150
6151 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6152 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6153 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6154 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6155 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6156 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6157 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6158
6159 @findex reg_names
6160 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6161 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6162 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6163 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6164
6165 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6166 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6167 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6168 @var{code}.
6169 @end defmac
6170
6171 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6172 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6173 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6174 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6175 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6176 in this way.
6177 @end defmac
6178
6179 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6180 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6181 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6182 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6183
6184 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6185 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6186 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6187 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6188 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6189 Format}.
6190 @end defmac
6191
6192 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6193 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6194 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6195 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6196 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6197 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6198 or whatever.
6199
6200 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6201 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6202 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6203 @end defmac
6204
6205 @findex final_sequence
6206 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6207 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6208 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6209 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6210 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6211 being output.
6212
6213 @findex asm_fprintf
6214 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6215 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6216 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6217 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6218 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6219 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6220 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6221 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6222 files can define these macros differently.
6223 @end defmac
6224
6225 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6226 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6227 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6228 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6229 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6230 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6231 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6232 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6233 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6234 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6235 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6236 @end defmac
6237
6238 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6239 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6240 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6241 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6242 first variant.
6243
6244 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6245 @smallexample
6246 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6247 @end smallexample
6248 @noindent
6249 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6250 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6251 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6252 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6253 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6254 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6255 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6256 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6257 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6258
6259 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6260 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6261 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6262
6263 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6264 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6265 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6266 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6267 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6268 opcodes or operand order.
6269 @end defmac
6270
6271 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6272 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6273 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6274 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6275 profiling.
6276 @end defmac
6277
6278 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6279 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6280 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6281 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6282 profiling.
6283 @end defmac
6284
6285 @node Dispatch Tables
6286 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6287
6288 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6289 This concerns dispatch tables.
6290
6291 @cindex dispatch table
6292 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6293 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6294 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6295 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6296 definitions of these labels are output using
6297 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6298 way here. For example,
6299
6300 @smallexample
6301 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6302 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6303 @end smallexample
6304
6305 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6306 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6307 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6308 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6309 mode and flags can be read.
6310 @end defmac
6311
6312 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6313 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6314 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6315
6316 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6317 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6318 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6319 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6320 For example,
6321
6322 @smallexample
6323 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6324 @end smallexample
6325 @end defmac
6326
6327 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6328 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6329 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6330 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6331 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6332 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6333
6334 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6335 for the table.
6336
6337 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6338 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6339 @end defmac
6340
6341 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6342 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6343 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6344 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6345 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6346 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6347 of the preceding label.
6348
6349 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6350 the jump-table.
6351 @end defmac
6352
6353 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6354
6355 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6356
6357 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6358
6359 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6360
6361 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6362
6363 @node Exception Region Output
6364 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6365
6366 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6367
6368 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6369 region.
6370
6371 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6372 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6373 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6374 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6375 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6376
6377 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6378 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6379 @end defmac
6380
6381 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6382 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6383 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6384 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6385
6386 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6387 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6388 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6389 be marked as not to be collected.
6390 @end defmac
6391
6392 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6393 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6394 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6395 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6396 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6397 @end defmac
6398
6399 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6400 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6401 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6402 @end defmac
6403
6404 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6405 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6406 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6407 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6408 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6409 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6410 @end defmac
6411
6412 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6413 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6414 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6415 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6416 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6417 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6418 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6419
6420 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6421 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6422 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6423
6424 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6425 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6426 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6427 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6428 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6429 depending on this setting.
6430
6431 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6432 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6433 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6434 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6435 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6436 @end deftypefn
6437
6438 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6439 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6440 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6441 command-line option processing.
6442 @end deftypevr
6443
6444 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6445 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6446 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6447 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6448 @end defmac
6449
6450 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6451 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6452 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6453 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6454 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6455 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6456 @end defmac
6457
6458 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6459 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6460 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6461 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6462 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6463 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{DWARF}. Only applicable if
6464 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6465 @end defmac
6466
6467 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6468
6469 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6470
6471 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6472
6473 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6474
6475 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6476
6477 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6478
6479 @node Alignment Output
6480 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6481
6482 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6483 This describes commands for alignment.
6484
6485 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6486 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6487 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6488
6489 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6490 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6491 define the macro.
6492
6493 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6494 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6495 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6496 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6497 @end defmac
6498
6499 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6500
6501 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6502 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6503 a @code{BARRIER}.
6504
6505 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6506 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6507 define the macro.
6508 @end defmac
6509
6510 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6511
6512 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6513 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6514 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6515
6516 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6517 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6518 define the macro.
6519
6520 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6521 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6522 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6523 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6524 @end defmac
6525
6526 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6527
6528 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6529 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6530 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6531 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6532
6533 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6534 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6535 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6536 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6537 @end defmac
6538
6539 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6540
6541 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6542 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6543 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6544 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6545 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6546 @end defmac
6547
6548 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6549 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6550 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6551 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6552 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6553 section.
6554 @end defmac
6555
6556 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6557 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6558 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6559 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6560 @end defmac
6561
6562 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6563 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6564 for padding, if necessary.
6565 @end defmac
6566
6567 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6568 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6569 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6570 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6571 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6572 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6573 @end defmac
6574
6575 @need 3000
6576 @node Debugging Info
6577 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6578
6579 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6580 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6581
6582 @menu
6583 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6584 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6585 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6586 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6587 * DWARF:: Macros for DWARF format.
6588 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6589 @end menu
6590
6591 @node All Debuggers
6592 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6593
6594 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6595 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6596
6597 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6598 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6599 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6600 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6601 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6602 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6603 compiler and another for DBX@.
6604
6605 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6606 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6607 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6608 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6609 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6610
6611 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6612 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6613 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6614 @end defmac
6615
6616 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6617 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6618 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6619 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6620 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6621 that produce debugging output for DBX and allow the frame-pointer to be
6622 eliminated when the @option{-g} option is used.
6623 @end defmac
6624
6625 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6626 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6627 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6628 @var{offset}.
6629 @end defmac
6630
6631 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6632 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6633 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6634 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6635 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6636 @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG},
6637 and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6638
6639 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6640 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6641 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6642 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6643 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6644
6645 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6646 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6647 @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6648 @end defmac
6649
6650 @node DBX Options
6651 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6652
6653 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6654 These are specific options for DBX output.
6655
6656 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6657 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6658 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6659 @end defmac
6660
6661 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6662 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6663 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6664 @end defmac
6665
6666 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6667 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6668 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6669 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6670 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6671 if there is any occasion to.
6672 @end defmac
6673
6674 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6675 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6676 in the text section.
6677 @end defmac
6678
6679 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6680 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6681 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6682 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6683 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6684 @end defmac
6685
6686 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6687 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6688 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6689 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6690 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6691 information format.
6692 @end defmac
6693
6694 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6695 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6696 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6697 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6698 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6699 @end defmac
6700
6701 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6702 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6703 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6704 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6705 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6706 @end defmac
6707
6708 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6709 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6710 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6711 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6712 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6713 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6714 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6715 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6716 @end defmac
6717
6718 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6719 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6720 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6721 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6722 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6723 if backslash is correct for your system.
6724 @end defmac
6725
6726 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6727 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6728 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6729 variable.
6730 @end defmac
6731
6732 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6733 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6734 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6735 @end defmac
6736
6737 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6738 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6739 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6740 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6741 @end defmac
6742
6743 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6744 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6745 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6746 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6747 @end defmac
6748
6749 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6750 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6751 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6752 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6753 @end defmac
6754
6755 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6756 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6757 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6758 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6759 code.
6760 @end defmac
6761
6762 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6763 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6764 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6765 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6766 an absolute address.
6767 @end defmac
6768
6769 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6770 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6771 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6772 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6773 @end defmac
6774
6775 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6776 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6777 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6778 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6779 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6780 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6781 number for a type number.
6782 @end defmac
6783
6784 @node DBX Hooks
6785 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6786
6787 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6788 These are hooks for DBX format.
6789
6790 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6791 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6792 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6793 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6794 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6795 unique labels in the assembly output.
6796
6797 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6798 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6799 @end defmac
6800
6801 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6802 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6803 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6804 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6805 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6806 @end defmac
6807
6808 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6809 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6810 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6811 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6812 @end defmac
6813
6814 @node File Names and DBX
6815 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6816
6817 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6818 This describes file names in DBX format.
6819
6820 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6821 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6822 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6823 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6824 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6825
6826 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6827 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6828
6829 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6830 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6831 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6832 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6833 @end defmac
6834
6835 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6836 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6837 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6838 the beginning of the file.
6839 @end defmac
6840
6841 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6842 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6843 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6844 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6845 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6846 @end defmac
6847
6848 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6849 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6850 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6851 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6852
6853 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6854 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6855 @end defmac
6856
6857 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6858 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6859 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6860 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6861 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6862 @end defmac
6863
6864 @need 2000
6865 @node DWARF
6866 @subsection Macros for DWARF Output
6867
6868 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6869 Here are macros for DWARF output.
6870
6871 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6872 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6873 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6874
6875 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6876
6877 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6878 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6879 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6880 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6881 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6882 @end defmac
6883
6884 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6885 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6886 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6887 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6888 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6889 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6890 @end defmac
6891
6892 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6893
6894 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6895 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6896 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6897 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6898 @end defmac
6899
6900 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6901
6902 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6903
6904 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6905
6906 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6907
6908 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6909 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6910 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6911 @end defmac
6912
6913 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6914 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6915 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
6916 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6917 @end defmac
6918
6919 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
6920 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6921 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
6922 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
6923 given @var{section}.
6924 @end defmac
6925
6926 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6927 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
6928 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6929 @end defmac
6930
6931 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6932 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
6933 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6934 @end defmac
6935
6936 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
6937 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
6938 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
6939 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
6940 is referenced by a function.
6941 @end defmac
6942
6943 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
6944
6945 @need 2000
6946 @node VMS Debug
6947 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
6948
6949 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6950 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
6951
6952 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
6953 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
6954 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
6955 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
6956 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
6957 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
6958 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
6959 @end defmac
6960
6961 @node Floating Point
6962 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6963 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
6964 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
6965
6966 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
6967 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6968 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6969 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6970 doing the compilation.
6971
6972 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6973 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
6974 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
6975 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
6976 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
6977 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
6978 target floating point formats are identical.
6979
6980 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
6981 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
6982 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
6983 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
6984
6985 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6986 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
6987 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
6988 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
6989 quantity.
6990 @end defmac
6991
6992 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6993 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
6994 @end deftypefn
6995
6996 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6997 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
6998 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
6999 @end deftypefn
7000
7001 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7002 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7003 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7004 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7005 defined by the C language for both.
7006 @end deftypefn
7007
7008 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7009 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7010 @end deftypefn
7011
7012 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7013 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7014 @end deftypefn
7015
7016 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7017 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7018 @end deftypefn
7019
7020 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7021 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7022 @end deftypefn
7023
7024 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7025 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7026 @end deftypefn
7027
7028 @node Mode Switching
7029 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7030 @cindex mode switching
7031 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7032
7033 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7034 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7035 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7036
7037 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7038 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7039 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7040 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7041 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7042 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you cannot put this into instruction emitting
7043 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7044
7045 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7046 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7047 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7048 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7049 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7050 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7051 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7052 are optional.
7053 @end defmac
7054
7055 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7056 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7057 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7058 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7059 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7060 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7061 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7062 entity in question.
7063 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7064 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7065 switch is needed / supplied.
7066 @end defmac
7067
7068 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7069
7070 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7071
7072 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7073
7074 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7075
7076 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7077
7078 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7079
7080 @node Target Attributes
7081 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7082 @cindex target attributes
7083 @cindex machine attributes
7084 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7085
7086 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7087 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7088 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7089
7090 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7091
7092 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7093
7094 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7095
7096 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7097
7098 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7099
7100 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7101
7102 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7103
7104 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7105 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7106 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7107 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7108 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7109 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7110 on this implementation detail.
7111 @end defmac
7112
7113 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7114
7115 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7116
7117 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7118
7119 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7120
7121 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7122
7123 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7124
7125 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7126
7127 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7128
7129 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7130
7131 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7132
7133 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7134
7135 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7136
7137 @node Emulated TLS
7138 @section Emulating TLS
7139 @cindex Emulated TLS
7140
7141 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7142 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7143 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7144 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7145 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7146 layer.
7147
7148 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7149 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7150 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7151 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7152
7153 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7154
7155 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7156
7157 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7158
7159 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7160
7161 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7162
7163 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7164
7165 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7166
7167 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7168
7169 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7170
7171 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7172
7173 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7174 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7175 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7176
7177 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7178 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7179 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7180 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7181
7182 @smallexample
7183 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7184 unsigned int d;
7185
7186 d = cp0count + 3;
7187 @end smallexample
7188
7189 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7190 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7191 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7192
7193 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7194 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7195 later in the function.
7196
7197 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7198 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7199 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7200
7201 @node PCH Target
7202 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7203 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7204
7205 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7206
7207 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7208
7209 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7210
7211 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7212
7213 @node C++ ABI
7214 @section C++ ABI parameters
7215 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7216
7217 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7218
7219 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7220
7221 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7222
7223 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7224
7225 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7226
7227 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7228
7229 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7230
7231 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7232
7233 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7234
7235 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7236
7237 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7238
7239 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7240
7241 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7242
7243 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7244
7245 @node Named Address Spaces
7246 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7247 @cindex named address spaces
7248
7249 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7250 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7251 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7252 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7253 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7254 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7255 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7256 @code{const} type attributes.
7257
7258 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7259 pointers to the generic address space.
7260
7261 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7262 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7263 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7264 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7265 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7266 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7267 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7268 always 32 bits).
7269
7270 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7271 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7272 address space.
7273
7274 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7275 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7276 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7277 named address space #1:
7278 @smallexample
7279 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7280 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7281 @end smallexample
7282
7283 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7284
7285 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7286
7287 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7288
7289 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7290
7291 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7292
7293 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7300
7301 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7302
7303 @node Misc
7304 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7305 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7306
7307 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7308 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7309
7310 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7311 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7312 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7313 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7314 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7315 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7316 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7317 @end defmac
7318
7319 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7320 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7321 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7322 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7323 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7324 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7325 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7326 @end defmac
7327
7328 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7329 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7330 elements of a jump-table should have.
7331 @end defmac
7332
7333 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7334 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7335 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7336 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7337 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7338 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7339 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7340 flags can be updated.
7341 @end defmac
7342
7343 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7344 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7345 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7346 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7347 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7348 is in effect.
7349 @end defmac
7350
7351 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7352
7353 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7354 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7355 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7356 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7357 @end defmac
7358
7359 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7360
7361 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7362 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7363 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7364 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7365 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7366 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7367 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7368 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7369
7370 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7371 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7372 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7373 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7374 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7375
7376 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7377 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7378 of these hard registers @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns false
7379 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7380 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7381
7382 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7383 mode, @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7384 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7385 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7386 @end defmac
7387
7388 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7389 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7390 extends.
7391 @end defmac
7392
7393 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7394
7395 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7396 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7397 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7398 @end defmac
7399
7400 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7401 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7402 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7403 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7404 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7405 at run-time.
7406 @end defmac
7407
7408 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7409 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7410 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7411 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7412 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7413 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7414 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7415 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7416 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7417 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7418 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7419
7420 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7421 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7422 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7423
7424 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7425 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7426 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7427 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7428 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7429
7430 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7431 @end defmac
7432
7433 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7434 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7435
7436 @hook TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7437
7438 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7439
7440 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7441 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7442 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7443 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7444 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7445 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7446
7447 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7448 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7449 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7450 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7451 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7452 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7453 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7454 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7455 the compiler.
7456
7457 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7458 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7459 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7460 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7461 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7462 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7463 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7464 expression
7465
7466 @smallexample
7467 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7468 @end smallexample
7469
7470 @noindent
7471 can be converted to
7472
7473 @smallexample
7474 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7475 @end smallexample
7476
7477 @noindent
7478 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7479 tested into the sign bit.
7480
7481 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7482 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7483 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7484 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7485 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7486 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7487
7488 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7489 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7490 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7491 to be used:
7492
7493 @itemize @bullet
7494 @item
7495 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7496 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7497 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7498 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7499 combine the normalization with other operations.
7500
7501 @item
7502 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7503 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7504 other machines.
7505
7506 @item
7507 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7508 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7509 others.
7510
7511 @item
7512 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7513 @end itemize
7514
7515 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7516 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7517 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7518 those cases, e.g., one matching
7519
7520 @smallexample
7521 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7522 @end smallexample
7523
7524 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7525 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7526 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7527 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7528 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7529 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7530 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7531 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7532
7533 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7534 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7535 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7536 @end defmac
7537
7538 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7539 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7540 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7541 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7542 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7543 this macro.
7544 @end defmac
7545
7546 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7547 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7548 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7549 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7550 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7551 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7552 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7553 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7554 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7555 given mode.
7556 @end defmac
7557
7558 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7559 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7560 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7561 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7562 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7563 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7564 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7565 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7566 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7567 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7568 this value.
7569
7570 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7571 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7572
7573 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7574 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7575 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7576 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7577
7578 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7579 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7580 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7581 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7582 breaking the API@.
7583 @end defmac
7584
7585 @defmac Pmode
7586 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7587 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7588 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7589 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7590 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7591
7592 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7593 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7594 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7595 to @code{Pmode}.
7596 @end defmac
7597
7598 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7599 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7600 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7601 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7602 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7603 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7604 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7605 @end defmac
7606
7607 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7608 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7609 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7610 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7611 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7612 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7613
7614 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7615 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7616 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7617 @end defmac
7618
7619 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7620
7621 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7622
7623 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7624 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7625 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7626 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7627 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7628 @end defmac
7629
7630 @findex #pragma
7631 @findex pragma
7632 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7633 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7634 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7635 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7636 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7637 setup required for the pragmas.
7638
7639 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7640 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7641 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7642
7643 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7644 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7645
7646 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7647 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7648 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7649 @end defmac
7650
7651 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7652 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7653
7654 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7655 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7656 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7657 pragma of the form
7658
7659 @smallexample
7660 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7661 @end smallexample
7662
7663 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7664 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7665 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7666 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7667 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7668 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7669 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7670 arguments of pragmas registered with
7671 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7672 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7673
7674 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7675 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7676 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7677 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7678 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7679 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7680 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7681 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7682 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7683 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7684 how to build this object file.
7685 @end deftypefun
7686
7687 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7688 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7689 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7690 @end defmac
7691
7692 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7693 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7694 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7695 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7696 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7697 @end defmac
7698
7699 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7700 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7701 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7702 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7703 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7704 @end defmac
7705
7706 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7707 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7708 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7709 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7710 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7711 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7712 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7713 you should define this macro.
7714
7715 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7716 @end defmac
7717
7718 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7719 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7720 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7721 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7722 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7723 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7724 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7725 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7726 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7727 slot of @var{insn}.
7728
7729 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7730 @end defmac
7731
7732 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7733 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7734 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7735 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7736 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7737 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7738
7739 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7740 @end defmac
7741
7742 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7743
7744 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7745 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7746 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7747 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7748 separate math library.
7749
7750 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7751 @end defmac
7752
7753 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7754 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7755 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7756
7757 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7758 is wrong.
7759 @end defmac
7760
7761 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7762 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7763 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7764 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7765 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7766 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7767 for cross-profiling.
7768 @end defmac
7769
7770 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7771
7772 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7773 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7774 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7775 1 if it does use cc0.
7776 @end defmac
7777
7778 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7779 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7780 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7781 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7782 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7783 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7784 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7785 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7786 @end defmac
7787
7788 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7789 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7790 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7791 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7792 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7793 @end defmac
7794
7795 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7796 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7797 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7798 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7799 about the currently processed blocks.
7800 @end defmac
7801
7802 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7803 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7804 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7805 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7806 to by @var{ce_info}.
7807 @end defmac
7808
7809 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7810 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7811 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7812 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7813 to by @var{ce_info}.
7814 @end defmac
7815
7816 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7817 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7818 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7819 to by @var{ce_info}.
7820 @end defmac
7821
7822 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7823
7824 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7825
7826 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7827
7828 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7829
7830 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
7831 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
7832 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
7833 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
7834 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
7835
7836 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7837
7838 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7839
7840 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7841
7842 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7843
7844 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7845
7846 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7847
7848 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7849
7850 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7851
7852 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7853
7854 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7855
7856 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7857
7858 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7859
7860 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7861
7862 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7863
7864 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7865 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7866 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7867 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7868 @end defmac
7869
7870 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7871 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
7872 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
7873 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
7874 executable files.
7875 @end defmac
7876
7877 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
7878 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
7879 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
7880 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
7881 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
7882 lists.
7883 @end defmac
7884
7885 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
7886 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
7887 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
7888 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
7889 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
7890 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
7891 defined as this expression:
7892
7893 @smallexample
7894 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
7895 build_tree_list
7896 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
7897 NULL))
7898 @end smallexample
7899 @end defmac
7900
7901 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
7902
7903 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
7904
7905 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
7906
7907 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
7908
7909 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
7910
7911 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
7912
7913 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
7914
7915 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
7916 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
7917 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
7918 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
7919 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
7920 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
7921 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
7922 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
7923 @end defmac
7924
7925 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7926 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7927 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
7928 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
7929 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7930 @end deftypefn
7931
7932 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7933 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7934 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
7935 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
7936 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
7937 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7938 @end deftypefn
7939
7940 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
7941 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
7942 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
7943 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
7944 that are different from @option{-I}.
7945 @end deftypefn
7946
7947 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
7948 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
7949 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
7950 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
7951 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
7952 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
7953 @end defmac
7954
7955 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
7956 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
7957 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
7958 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
7959 @end defmac
7960
7961 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
7962 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
7963 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
7964 @end defmac
7965
7966 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
7967 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
7968 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
7969 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
7970 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
7971 @end defmac
7972
7973 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
7974 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
7975 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
7976 @end defmac
7977
7978 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
7979 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
7980 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
7981 and scanf formatter settings.
7982 @end defmac
7983
7984 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
7985
7986 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
7987
7988 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
7989
7990 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
7991
7992 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
7993
7994 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
7995
7996 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
7997 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
7998 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
7999 @end defmac
8000
8001 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8002 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8003 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8004 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8005 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8006 @end defmac
8007
8008 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8009
8010 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8011
8012 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8013
8014 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8015
8016 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8017
8018 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8019
8020 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8021
8022 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8023
8024 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8025
8026 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8027
8028 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8029
8030 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8031
8032 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8033
8034 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8035 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8036 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8037 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8038 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8039 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8040 representation.
8041
8042 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8043 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8044 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8045 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8046 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8047
8048 @itemize @bullet
8049 @item
8050 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8051 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8052 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8053
8054 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8055 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8056 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8057 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8058 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8059 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8060 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8061 not really a large change.
8062
8063 @item
8064 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8065 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8066 port in this code.
8067
8068 @item
8069 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8070 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8071 @end itemize
8072
8073 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8074 maintainer is familiar with.
8075
8076 @end defmac
8077
8078 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS